<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rishi</id>
	<title>STMDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rishi"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php/Special:Contributions/Rishi"/>
	<updated>2026-04-16T13:36:52Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.39.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=903</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=903"/>
		<updated>2022-12-17T10:19:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other useful environments in the front matter===&lt;br /&gt;
Graphical abstract and Highlights are to be given within {frontmatter} environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Graphical abstract====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \includegraphics{graphicalabstract.png}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Highlights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=902</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=902"/>
		<updated>2022-08-24T13:44:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other useful environments in the front matter===&lt;br /&gt;
Graphical abstract and Highlights are to be given within {frontmatter} environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Graphical abstract====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \includegraphics{graphicalabstract.png}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Highlights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle_-_CAS&amp;diff=901</id>
		<title>Elsarticle - CAS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle_-_CAS&amp;diff=901"/>
		<updated>2022-08-24T13:28:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Elsarticle.cls|&amp;lt;Back]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Elsarticle - CAS==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Class files==&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two class files &lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cas-sc.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for single column journals.&lt;br /&gt;
#:&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;\documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{cas-sc}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cas-dc.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for double column journals.&lt;br /&gt;
#:&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;\documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{cas-dc}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
and have an option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longmktitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to handle long front matter.&lt;br /&gt;
===Front matter===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \title[mode = title]{Leveraging social media news to predict stock&lt;br /&gt;
    index movement using RNN-boost}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \tnotemark[1,2]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \tnotetext[1]{This document is the results of the research project&lt;br /&gt;
    funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \tnotetext[2]{The second title footnote which is a longer text&lt;br /&gt;
    matter to fill through the whole text width and overflow into&lt;br /&gt;
    another line in the footnotes area of the first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[1,3]{V. {{\=A}}nand Rawat}[type=editor,&lt;br /&gt;
    auid=000,bioid=1,&lt;br /&gt;
    prefix=Sir, &lt;br /&gt;
    role=Researcher, &lt;br /&gt;
    orcid=0000-0001-7511-2910]&lt;br /&gt;
  \cormark[1] &lt;br /&gt;
  \fnmark[1] &lt;br /&gt;
  \ead{cvr_1@tug.org.in} &lt;br /&gt;
  \ead[url]{www.cvr.cc,www.tug.org.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \credit{Conceptualization of this study, Methodology, Software}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \address[1]{Indian \TeX{} Users Group, Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[2,4]{Han Theh Thanh}[style=chinese]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[2,3] {T. Rishi Nair}[role=Co-ordinator,&lt;br /&gt;
    suffix=Jr]&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnmark[2] &lt;br /&gt;
  \ead{rishi@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead[URL]{www.sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \credit{Data curation, Writing - Original draft preparation}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \address[2]{Sayahna Foundation, Jagathy, Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[1,3]{Karl Berry}&lt;br /&gt;
  \cormark[2] &lt;br /&gt;
  \fnmark[1,3]&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead{karl@freefriends.org} &lt;br /&gt;
  \ead[URL]{www.tug.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \address[3]{\TeX{} Users Group, Providence, MA, USA}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author} &lt;br /&gt;
  \cortext[cor2]{Principal corresponding author} &lt;br /&gt;
  \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote. &lt;br /&gt;
    but is common to third author as well.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote&lt;br /&gt;
    and it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
    yet sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \fntext[fn3]{K. Berry is the editor of \TeX Live.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \nonumnote{This note has no numbers. In this work we demonstrate&lt;br /&gt;
    $a_b$ the formation Y\_1 of a new type of polariton on the&lt;br /&gt;
    interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
    micro-sphere placed on the slab. The evanescent field of the&lt;br /&gt;
    resonant whispering gallery mode (\WGM) of the micro sphere has a&lt;br /&gt;
    substantial gradient, and therefore effectively couples with the&lt;br /&gt;
    quadrupole $1S$ excitons in cuprous oxide.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{abstract}[S U M M A R Y]&lt;br /&gt;
  In this work we demonstrate $a_b$ the formation Y\_1 of a new type&lt;br /&gt;
  of polariton on the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a&lt;br /&gt;
  polystyrene micro-sphere placed on the slab. The evanescent field of&lt;br /&gt;
  the resonant whispering gallery mode (\WGM) of the micro sphere has&lt;br /&gt;
  a substantial gradient, and therefore effectively couples with the&lt;br /&gt;
  quadrupole $1^S$ excitons in cuprous oxide. This evanescent&lt;br /&gt;
  polariton has a long life-time, which is determined only by its&lt;br /&gt;
  excitonic and \WGM component. The polariton lower branch has a well&lt;br /&gt;
  pronounced minimum. This suggests that this excitation is localized&lt;br /&gt;
  and can be utilized for possible \BEC. The spatial coherence of the&lt;br /&gt;
  polariton can be improved by assembling the micro-spheres into a&lt;br /&gt;
  linear chain.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{keywords}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadrupole exciton \sep polariton \sep \WGM \sep \BEC&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{keywords}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \maketitle&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    [[File:cas-dc-frontmatter.png|thumb|right|600px|CAS Front matter in double column]]&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
    [[File:cas-sc-frontmatter.png|thumb|right|600px|CAS Front matter in single column]]&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
====Title====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command have the below options:&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Document title&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;alt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Alternate title&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sub&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Sub title&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;trans&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Translated title&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;transsub&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Translated sub title&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=title]{This is a title}&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=alt]{This is a alternate title}&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=sub]{This is a sub title}&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=trans]{This is a translated title}&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=transsub]{This is a translated sub title}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-titles.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Author====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command have the below options:&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;auid&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Author id&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;bioid&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Biography id&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;alt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Alternate author&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;style&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Style of author name &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;chinese&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;prefix&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Prefix &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Sir&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;suffix&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suffix&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;degree&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Degree &lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;role&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Role&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;orcid&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: ORCID&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;collab&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Collaboration&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;anon&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Anonymous author&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;deceased &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Deceased author&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twitter &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Twitter account&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;facebook &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Facebook account&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;linkedin &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: LinkedIn account&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;plus&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Google plus account&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;gplus&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Google plus account&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,3]{Author Name}[type=editor,&lt;br /&gt;
    auid=000,bioid=1,&lt;br /&gt;
    prefix=Sir,&lt;br /&gt;
    role=Researcher,&lt;br /&gt;
    orcid=0000-0001-7511-2910,&lt;br /&gt;
    facebook=&amp;lt;facebook id&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
    twitter=&amp;lt;twitter id&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
    linkedin=&amp;lt;linkedin id&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
    gplus=&amp;lt;gplus id&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[File:cas-titles.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; options]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Various Marks in the Front Matter====&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter becomes complicated due to various kinds of notes and marks to the title&lt;br /&gt;
and author names. Marks in the title will be denoted by a star (&amp;amp;#x22C6;) mark; footnotes are denoted by super scripted Arabic numerals, corresponding author by of an Conformal asterisk (*) mark.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Title marks=====&lt;br /&gt;
Title mark can be entered by the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotemark[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and the corresponding text&lt;br /&gt;
can be entered with the command &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. An example will be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title[mode=title]{Leveraging social media news to predict&lt;br /&gt;
                      stock index movement using RNN-boost}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\tnotemark[1,2]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\tnotetext[1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
   project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\tnotetext[2]{The second title footnote which is a longer text matter&lt;br /&gt;
   to fill through the whole text width and overflow into&lt;br /&gt;
   another line in the footnotes area of the first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotemark&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be anywhere in the front matter, but shall be before &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\maketitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Author marks=====&lt;br /&gt;
Author names can have many kinds of marks and notes:&lt;br /&gt;
#footnote mark : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnmark[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#footnote text : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#affiliation mark : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#email : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ead{&amp;lt;emailid&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#url : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ead[url]{&amp;lt;url&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#corresponding author mark : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cormark[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#corresponding author text : &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext[&amp;lt;num&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Other marks=====&lt;br /&gt;
At times, authors want footnotes which leave no marks in the author names. The note text&lt;br /&gt;
shall be listed as part of the front matter notes. Class files provides &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\nonumnote&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
The usage &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;\nonumnote{&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
and should be entered anywhere before the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\maketitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command for this to take effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Abstract and Keywords====&lt;br /&gt;
Abstract shall be entered in an environment that starts with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and ends&lt;br /&gt;
with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Longer abstracts spanning more than one page is also possible in&lt;br /&gt;
Class file even in double column mode. We need to invoke &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longmktitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option in the class&lt;br /&gt;
loading line for this to happen smoothly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key words are enclosed in a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 This is a abstract. \lipsum[3]&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keywords}&lt;br /&gt;
 First keyword \sep Second keyword \sep Third keyword \sep Fourth keyword&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keywords}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-abstract-keyword.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Abstract and keywords]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
===Main Matter===&lt;br /&gt;
====Tables====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal tables=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{table}&lt;br /&gt;
  \caption{This is a test caption.}&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{tabular*}{\tblwidth}{@{} LLLL@{} }&lt;br /&gt;
   \toprule&lt;br /&gt;
    Col 1 &amp;amp; Col 2\\&lt;br /&gt;
   \midrule&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345\\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345\\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345\\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345\\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345\\&lt;br /&gt;
   \bottomrule&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{tabular*}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{table}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-simple-table.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Simple table]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=====Span tables=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{table*}[width=.9\textwidth,cols=4,pos=h]&lt;br /&gt;
  \caption{This is a test caption.}&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{tabular*}{\tblwidth}{@{} LLLLLL@{} }&lt;br /&gt;
   \toprule&lt;br /&gt;
    Col 1 &amp;amp; Col 2 &amp;amp; Col 3 &amp;amp; Col4 &amp;amp; Col5 &amp;amp; Col6 &amp;amp; Col7\\&lt;br /&gt;
   \midrule&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 \\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 \\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 \\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 \\&lt;br /&gt;
    12345 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 &amp;amp; 12345 &amp;amp; 123 \\&lt;br /&gt;
   \bottomrule&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{tabular*}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{table*}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-span-table.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Span table]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Figures====&lt;br /&gt;
=====Normal figures=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{figure}&lt;br /&gt;
	\centering&lt;br /&gt;
		\includegraphics[scale=.75]{Fig1.pdf}&lt;br /&gt;
	\caption{The evanescent light - $1S$ quadrupole coupling&lt;br /&gt;
	($g_{1,l}$) scaled to the bulk exciton-photon coupling&lt;br /&gt;
	($g_{1,2}$). The size parameter $kr_{0}$ is denoted as $x$ and&lt;br /&gt;
	the \PMS is placed directly on the cuprous oxide sample ($\delta&lt;br /&gt;
	r=0$, See also Fig. \protect\ref{FIG:2}).}&lt;br /&gt;
	\label{FIG:1}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{figure}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-simple-figure.png|thumb|right|300px|CAS Simple figure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Span figures=====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{figure*}&lt;br /&gt;
	\centering&lt;br /&gt;
	  \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,height=2in]{Fig2.pdf}&lt;br /&gt;
	\caption{Schematic of formation of the evanescent polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
	linear chain of \PMS. The actual dispersion is determined by &lt;br /&gt;
        the ratio of two coupling parameters such as exciton-\WGM coupling&lt;br /&gt;
	and \WGM-\WGM coupling between the microspheres.}&lt;br /&gt;
	\label{FIG:2}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{figure*}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:cas-span-figure.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Span figure]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Theorem and theorem like environments====&lt;br /&gt;
CAS class file provides a few hooks to format theorems and theorem like environments with ease. All commands the options that are used with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. Class file provides three commands to format theorem or theorem like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  command formats a theorem in LaTeX’s default style with italicized font for theorem statement, bold weight for theorem heading and theorem number typeset at the right of theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. Here is an example coding and output:&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{theorem}\label{thm}&lt;br /&gt;
 The \WGM evanescent field penetration depth into the cuprous oxide&lt;br /&gt;
 adjacent crystal is much larger than the \QE radius: &lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{equation*}&lt;br /&gt;
  \lambda_{1S}/2 \pi \left({\epsilon_{Cu2O}-1}\right)^{1/2} = 414 \mbox{&lt;br /&gt;
  \AA} \gg a_B = 4.6 \mbox{ \AA}  &lt;br /&gt;
 \end{equation*}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[File:cas-theorem.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Theorem]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  command does exactly the same thing as with except that the body font is up-shape instead of italic. See the example below:&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{definition}{Definition}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{definition}&lt;br /&gt;
 The bulk and evanescent polaritons in cuprous oxide&lt;br /&gt;
 are formed through the quadrupole part of the light-matter&lt;br /&gt;
 interaction:&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{equation*}&lt;br /&gt;
  H_{int} = \frac{i e }{m \omega_{1S}} {\bf E}_{i,s} \cdot {\bf p}&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{equation*}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{definition}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[File:cas-definition.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Definition]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;  command helps to define proof and custom proof environments without counters as provided in the example code. Given below is an example of proof of theorem kind.&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm}}&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{pot}&lt;br /&gt;
 The photon part of the polariton trapped inside the \PMS moves as&lt;br /&gt;
 it would move in a micro-cavity of the effective modal volume $V&lt;br /&gt;
 \ll 4 \pi r_{0}^{3} /3$. Consequently, it can escape through the&lt;br /&gt;
 evanescent field. This evanescent field essentially has a quantum&lt;br /&gt;
 origin and is due to tunneling through the potential caused by&lt;br /&gt;
 dielectric mismatch on the \PMS surface. Therefore, we define the&lt;br /&gt;
 \emph{evanescent} polariton (\EP) as an evanescent light - \QE&lt;br /&gt;
 coherent superposition.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{pot}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[File:cas-proof.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Proof]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
====Enumerated and Itemized Lists====&lt;br /&gt;
CAS class files provides an extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
You can see the coding and typeset copy.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item The enumerate environment starts with an optional&lt;br /&gt;
        argument ‘1.’ so that the item counter will be suffixed&lt;br /&gt;
        by a period as in the optional argument.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the&lt;br /&gt;
        optional argument, the output will have closing parenthesis&lt;br /&gt;
        for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item You can use ‘(a)’ for alphabetical counter and ’(i)’ for&lt;br /&gt;
        roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
    \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
    \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
    \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
      \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
      \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
    \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
    \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[File:cas-list.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS List]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
====Biography====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bio&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command have the below options:&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;width&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Width of the author photo (default is 1in).&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pos&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Position of author photo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\bio[width=10mm,pos=l]{tuglogo.jpg}&lt;br /&gt;
 \textbf{Another Biography:}&lt;br /&gt;
  Recent experimental \cite{HARA:2005} and theoretical&lt;br /&gt;
  \cite{DEYCH:2006} studies have shown that the \WGM can travel&lt;br /&gt;
  along the chain as &amp;quot;heavy photons&amp;quot;. Therefore the \WGM acquires&lt;br /&gt;
  the spatial dispersion, and the evanescent quadrupole polariton&lt;br /&gt;
  has the form (See Fig.\ref{FIG:3}):&lt;br /&gt;
\endbio&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
====CRediT authorship contribution statement====&lt;br /&gt;
Give the authorship contribution after each author as &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \credit{Conceptualization of this study, Methodology, Software}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print the details use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\printcredits&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \author[1,3]{V. {{\=A}}nand Rawat}[auid=000,&lt;br /&gt;
                   bioid=1,&lt;br /&gt;
                   prefix=Sir,&lt;br /&gt;
                   role=Researcher,&lt;br /&gt;
                   orcid=0000-0001-7511-2910]&lt;br /&gt;
  \cormark[1]&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnmark[1]&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead{cvr_1@tug.org.in}&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead[url]{www.cvr.cc, www.tug.org.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \credit{Conceptualization of this study, Methodology, Software}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \address[1]{Indian \TeX{} Users Group, Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[2,4]{Han Theh Thanh}[style=chinese]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \author[2,3]{T. Rishi Nair}[role=Co-ordinator,&lt;br /&gt;
                   suffix=Jr]&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnmark[2]&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead{rishi@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
  \ead[URL]{www.sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  \credit{Data curation, Writing - Original draft preparation}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  . . .&lt;br /&gt;
  . . .&lt;br /&gt;
  . . .&lt;br /&gt;
  \printcredits&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:cas-credit-authorship.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Credit Authorship]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
====Bibliography====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;biblatex&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;biber&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the recommended package for bibliography&lt;br /&gt;
processing — both citation and listing. As you are aware, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;biblatex&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; offers a wide variety of&lt;br /&gt;
bibliography citation features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please take a look at [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|this page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{thebibliography}{17}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[{Kavoulakis and Baym(1996)}]{KAVOULAKIS:1996}&lt;br /&gt;
 G.~Kavoulakis and G.~Baym, Phys. Rev. B \textbf{53}, 7227 (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\bibitem[{Roslyak and Birman(2007)}]{ROSLYAK:2007}&lt;br /&gt;
  O.~Roslyak and J.~Birman, arXiv:cond-mat/0703650, PRB to be published&lt;br /&gt;
  (2007).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{thebibliography}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:cas-references.png|thumb|right|400px|CAS Credit Authorship]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=900</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=900"/>
		<updated>2022-08-24T13:26:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Other useful environments in the front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Other useful environments in the front matter====&lt;br /&gt;
Graphical abstract and Highlights are to be given within {frontmatter} environment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Graphical abstract&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \includegraphics{graphicalabstract.png}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Highlights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=899</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=899"/>
		<updated>2022-08-24T13:12:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Specimen of a title page coding */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Other useful environments in the front matter====&lt;br /&gt;
;Graphical abstract&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \includegraphics{graphicalabstract.png}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Highlights&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=898</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=898"/>
		<updated>2022-08-24T13:10:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Specimen of a title page coding */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
 \includegraphics{graphicalabstract.png}&lt;br /&gt;
\end{graphicalabstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Other useful environments====&lt;br /&gt;
;Highlights&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the highlight point of this article.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{highlights}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=897</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=897"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:40:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-1p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-5p.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-5p.png&amp;diff=896</id>
		<title>File:Els-5p.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-5p.png&amp;diff=896"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:39:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-1p.png&amp;diff=895</id>
		<title>File:Els-1p.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-1p.png&amp;diff=895"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:39:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=894</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=894"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:32:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Specimen of a title page coding */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=893</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=893"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:30:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm2.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm2.png&amp;diff=892</id>
		<title>File:Els-fm2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm2.png&amp;diff=892"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:29:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=891</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=891"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:20:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=890</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=890"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:19:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Output of the footnotes and footer part will be as below:&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=889</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=889"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:18:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm1a.png&amp;diff=888</id>
		<title>File:Els-fm1a.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm1a.png&amp;diff=888"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:16:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm1.png&amp;diff=887</id>
		<title>File:Els-fm1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els-fm1.png&amp;diff=887"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:16:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=886</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=886"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:15:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els-fm1a.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=885</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=885"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:10:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=884</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=884"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T13:07:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{J.K. Krishnan\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{jkk@example.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1,2]{Han Thane\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{han@different.edu}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{T. Rafeeq\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.nowhere.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
  it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not yet&lt;br /&gt;
  sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[1]{organization={Department of Physics, &lt;br /&gt;
                              J.K. Institute of Science},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Jawahar Nagar}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Trivandrum},&lt;br /&gt;
%               citysep={}, % Uncomment if no comma needed between city and postcode&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={695013}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Kerala},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[2]{organization={World Scientific University},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 29}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={1011 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                postcodesep={}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Amsterdam},&lt;br /&gt;
                country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\affiliation[3]{organization={University of Intelligent Studies},&lt;br /&gt;
                addressline={Street 15}, &lt;br /&gt;
                city={Jabaldesh},&lt;br /&gt;
                postcode={825001}, &lt;br /&gt;
                state={Orissa}, &lt;br /&gt;
                country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of another TeX source which was coded as above will look like as the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=883</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=883"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:50:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=882</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=882"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:50:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=881</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=881"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:40:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a_b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=880</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=880"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:40:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen $a^b$ title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=879</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=879"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:38:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Bibliography */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=878</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=878"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:36:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=877</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=877"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:32:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Usage */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=876</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=876"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T11:30:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/synaxhighlight&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=875</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=875"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:34:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot; inline&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keywords can be marked up in the following manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=874</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=874"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:31:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Installation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 3.3) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=873</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=873"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:20:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png|650px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=872</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=872"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:17:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png|675px]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=871</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=871"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:12:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png|width=75%]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=870</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=870"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:10:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1-sc.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els9.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=869</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=869"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:09:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table frame=&amp;quot;box&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;[[Image:Els2.png]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1-sc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els9.png&amp;diff=868</id>
		<title>File:Els9.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els9.png&amp;diff=868"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:02:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els9.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=867</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=867"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:01:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png|70%]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1-sc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els1-sc.png&amp;diff=866</id>
		<title>File:Els1-sc.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els1-sc.png&amp;diff=866"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T10:01:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=865</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=865"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:58:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Final print */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png|70%]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els9.png&amp;diff=864</id>
		<title>File:Els9.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els9.png&amp;diff=864"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:58:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els9.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els1b-new.png&amp;diff=863</id>
		<title>File:Els1b-new.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els1b-new.png&amp;diff=863"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:53:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els1b-new.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=862</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=862"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:52:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Front matter */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png|70%]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els5.png&amp;diff=861</id>
		<title>File:Els5.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els5.png&amp;diff=861"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:49:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els5.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=860</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=860"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:48:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Theorem and theorem-like environments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els4.png&amp;diff=859</id>
		<title>File:Els4.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els4.png&amp;diff=859"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:48:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els4.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=858</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=858"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:47:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Theorem and theorem-like environments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=857</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=857"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:47:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Theorem and theorem-like environments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=856</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=856"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:46:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Theorem and theorem-like environments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=855</id>
		<title>Elsarticle.cls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls&amp;diff=855"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:45:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: /* Theorem and theorem-like environments */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[http://www.tug.org/tutorials/tugindia/ [LaTeX Tutorial]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Elsarticle - CAS|[Elsarticle - CAS]]] &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[FAQ - elsarticle.cls|[FAQ - elsarticle.cls]]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; [[Model-wise_bibliographic_style_files|[Model-wise bibliographic style files]]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Introduction==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a thoroughly rewritten document class&lt;br /&gt;
for formatting LaTeX submissions to Elsevier journals.&lt;br /&gt;
This class uses the environments and commands defined in the LaTeX kernel&lt;br /&gt;
without any change in the signature so that clashes with other&lt;br /&gt;
contributed LaTeX packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preview-latex.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc. will be minimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is primarily built upon the default&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  This class depends on the following packages&lt;br /&gt;
for its proper functioning:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pifont.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for openstar in the title footnotes;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for citation processing;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;geometry.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for margin settings;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;fleqn.clo&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for left aligned equations;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for graphics inclusion;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional font package, if the document is to  be formatted with Times and compatible math fonts;&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; optional packages if hyperlinking is required in the document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above packages are part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, the users need not be bothered about downloading any&lt;br /&gt;
extra packages.  Furthermore, users are free to make use of AMS&lt;br /&gt;
math packages such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsmath.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., if they want to.  All&lt;br /&gt;
these packages work in tandem with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; without&lt;br /&gt;
any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Major Differences==&lt;br /&gt;
Following are the major differences between &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and its predecessor package, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is built upon &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is not. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsart.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; redefines many of the commands in the LaTeX classes/kernel, which can possibly cause surprising clashes with other contributed LaTeX packages;&lt;br /&gt;
* provides preprint document formatting by default, and optionally formats the document as per the final style of models &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5+&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; of Elsevier journals;&lt;br /&gt;
* some easier ways for formatting &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;list&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;theorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environments are provided while people can still use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the main citation processing package which can comprehensively handle all kinds of citations and works perfectly with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hyperref.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;hypernat.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;;&lt;br /&gt;
* long title pages are processed correctly in preprint and final formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The package is available at [http://www.elsevier.com/wps/find/authorsview.authors/elsarticle author resources page at Elsevier].&lt;br /&gt;
It can also be found in any of the nodes of the Comprehensive TeX Archive Network (CTAN), one of the primary nodes being &lt;br /&gt;
[http://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/elsarticle/ http://tug.ctan.org]. Please download &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is a composite class with documentation and  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is the LaTeX installer file. When we compile the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.ins&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with LaTeX, it provides the class file, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; by stripping off all the documentation from the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.dtx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; file. The class may be moved or copied to a place, usually, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$TEXMF/tex/latex/elsevier/&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, or a folder which will be read by LaTeX during document compilation.  The TeX file database needs updation after moving/copying a class file.  Usually, we use commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;mktexlsr&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;texhash&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; depending upon the distribution and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the latest version of elsarticle.cls (Version 1.21) is available only in this wiki page. CTAN and author resources pages at Elsevier will be updated as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Usage==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The class should be loaded with the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \documentclass[&amp;lt;options&amp;gt;]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: default option which format the document for submission to Elsevier journals. Along with this option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\date{Custom date}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be provided which will be printed in preprint line in footer.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;nopreprintline&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: Suppresses the preprint line in the footer of the first page including the date. &lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;review&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: similar to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; option, but increases the baselineskip to facilitate an easier review process.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 1+ journals. This is always of single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats the article to the look and feel of the final format of model 3+ journals. If the journal is a two column model, use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in combination.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: formats for model 5+ journals. This is always of two column style.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: author&amp;amp;ndash;year citation style of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. If you want to add extra options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, you may use the options as comma delimited strings as arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. An example would be:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \biboptions{longnamesfirst,angle,semicolon}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;number&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: numbered citation style. Extra options can be loaded with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sort&amp;amp;compress&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: sorts and compresses the numbered citations. For example, citation [1,2,3] will become [1-3].&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;longtitle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: if front matter is unusually long, use this option to split the title page across pages with the correct placement of title and author footnotes in the first page.&lt;br /&gt;
; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;times&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: loads &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;txfonts.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, if available in the system to use Times and compatible math fonts.&lt;br /&gt;
* All options of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;article.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be used with this   document class.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default options loaded are &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;a4paper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;10pt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oneside&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;onecolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;preprint&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front matter==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of front matter coding &amp;amp;mdash; &lt;br /&gt;
* each author is connected to an affiliation with a footnote marker, and hence all authors are grouped together and the affiliations follow; &lt;br /&gt;
* authors with the same affiliation are grouped together and the relevant affiliation follows this group. An example coding of the first type is provided below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[1]{Elsevier B.V., Radarweg 29, 1043 NX Amsterdam, &lt;br /&gt;
   The Netherlands}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[2]{Sayahna Foundations, JWRA 34, Jagathy, &lt;br /&gt;
   Trivandrum 695014, India}&lt;br /&gt;
 \address[3]{STM Document Engineering Pvt Ltd., Mepukada,&lt;br /&gt;
   Malayinkil, Trivandrum 695571, India}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
. . .&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Output of the above TeX sources will look like the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1b-new.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\title&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; are self-explanatory. Various components are linked to each other by a &lt;br /&gt;
label–reference mechanism; for instance, title footnote is linked to the title with a footnote mark generated by referring to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\label&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; string of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. We have used similar commands such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnoteref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the title note to the title), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\corref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the corresponding author text to the corresponding author); &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fnref&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (to link the footnote text to the relevant author names). TeX needs two compilations to resolve the footnote marks in the preamble part. Given below are the syntax of various note marks and note texts.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnoteref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \corref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fnref{&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;}                                                                                 &lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;title note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;corresponding author note text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;]{&amp;lt;author footnote text&amp;gt;}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
where &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;label(s)&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can be either one or more comma delimited&lt;br /&gt;
label strings. The optional arguments to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\author&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
command holds the ref label(s) of the address(es) to which the author&lt;br /&gt;
is affiliated while each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\address&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command can have an&lt;br /&gt;
optional argument of a label. In the same manner,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\tnotetext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\fntext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cortext&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
will have optional arguments as their respective labels and note text&lt;br /&gt;
as their mandatory argument.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example code provides the markup of the second type of&lt;br /&gt;
author affiliation.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\author{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
\author{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote; this is a very long footnote and&lt;br /&gt;
   it should be a really long footnote. But this footnote is not&lt;br /&gt;
   sufficiently long enough to make two lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
\fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The output of the above TeX sources will look like the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The front matter part has further environments such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{abstract} . . . \end{abstract}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{keyword} ... \end{keyword}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which contain the abstract and keywords respectively. Keywords can be marked up in the following&lt;br /&gt;
manner:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exiton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each keyword shall be separated by a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\sep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command. MSC classifications shall be provided in the keyword environment with the commands &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.  &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; accepts an optional argument to accommodate future revisions. e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\MSC[2008]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The default is 2000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Specimen of a title page coding===&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the specimen of a title page coding.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\documentclass[preprint,1p,12pt]{elsarticle}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\journal{Nuclear Physics B}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{document}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is a collaborative effort.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is longer &lt;br /&gt;
     than the first one and with an intention to fill&lt;br /&gt;
    in up more than one line while formatting.} &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \title{This is a specimen title\tnoteref{t1,t2}}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t1]{This document is the results of the research&lt;br /&gt;
    project funded by the National Science Foundation.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \tnotetext[t2]{The second title footnote which is a longer &lt;br /&gt;
    text matter to fill through the whole text width and &lt;br /&gt;
    overflow into another line in the footnotes area of the &lt;br /&gt;
    first page.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[1]{Jos Migchielsen\corref{cor1}%&lt;br /&gt;
  \fnref{fn1}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{J.Migchielsen@elsevier.com}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[2]{CV Radhakrishnan\fnref{fn2}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead{cvr@sayahna.org}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\author[3]{CV Rajagopal\fnref{fn1,fn3}}&lt;br /&gt;
\ead[url]{www.stmdocs.in}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \cortext[cor1]{Corresponding author}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn1]{This is the first author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn2]{Another author footnote, this is a very long &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote and it should be a really long footnote. But this &lt;br /&gt;
   footnote is not yet sufficiently long enough to make two &lt;br /&gt;
   lines of footnote text.}&lt;br /&gt;
 \fntext[fn3]{Yet another author footnote.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[1]{organization={Elsevier B.V.}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Radarweg 29},&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={1043 NX}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Amsterdam}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={The Netherlands}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[2]{organization={Sayahna Foundation},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={JWRA 34, Jagathy}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695014}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 \affiliation[3]{organization={STM Document Engineering &lt;br /&gt;
                               Pvt Ltd.},&lt;br /&gt;
                 addressline={Mepukada, Malayinkil}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 city={Trivandrum}&lt;br /&gt;
                 postcode={695571}, &lt;br /&gt;
                 country={India}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
In this work we demonstrate the formation of a new type of polariton on&lt;br /&gt;
the interface between a cuprous oxide slab and a polystyrene&lt;br /&gt;
micro-sphere placed on the slab. .....&lt;br /&gt;
\end{abstract}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
  quadruple exciton \sep polariton \sep WGM&lt;br /&gt;
\end{keyword}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\end{frontmatter}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
\section{Introduction}\label{sec1}&lt;br /&gt;
Although quadrupole excitons (QE) in cuprous oxide crystals are good&lt;br /&gt;
candidates for BEC... See section \ref{sec1}.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Floats==&lt;br /&gt;
Figures may be included using the command, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in combination with or without its several options to further control graphics. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\includegraphics&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is provided by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphic[s,x].sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is part of any standard LaTeX distribution.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;graphicx.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is loaded by default. LaTeX accepts figures in the postscript format while pdfLaTeX accepts &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.pdf&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.mps&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (metapost), &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.jpg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;*.png&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; formats. pdfLaTeX does not accept graphic files in the postscript format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table environment is handy for marking up tabular material. If users want to use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;multirow.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;array.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc., to fine control/enhance the tables, they are welcome to load any package of their choice and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will work in combination with all loaded packages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Theorem and theorem-like environments==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides a few shortcuts to format theorems and theorem-like environments with ease. In all commands the options that are used with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command will work exactly in the same manner. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides three commands to format theorem or theorem-like environments:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}&lt;br /&gt;
\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}&lt;br /&gt;
\newdefinition{rmk}{Remark}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pf}{Proof}&lt;br /&gt;
\newproof{pot}{Proof of Theorem \ref{thm2}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command formats a theorem in LaTeX&#039;s default style with italicized font, bold font for theorem heading and theorem number at the right hand side of the theorem heading. It also optionally accepts an argument which will be printed as an extra heading in parentheses. The following text will show you how some text enclosed in &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{thm} . . . \end{thm}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will look like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command is the same in all respects as its &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; counterpart except that the font shape is roman instead of italic. Both &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newdefinition&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newtheorem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; commands automatically define counters for the environments defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{rmk} . . . \end{rmk}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\newproof&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command defines proof environments with upright font shape. No counters are defined. See the output of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{pot} . . . \end{pot}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which is given below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can also make use of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amsthm.sty&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; which will override all the default definitions described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enumerated and Itemized Lists==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides extended list processing macros which makes the usage a bit more user friendly than the default LaTeX list macros. With an optional argument to the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\begin{enumerate}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, you can change the list counter type and its attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[1.]&lt;br /&gt;
\item The enumerate environment starts with an optional argument `1.&#039;, so that the item counter will be suffixed  by a period.&lt;br /&gt;
\item If you provide a closing parenthesis to the number in the  optional argument, the output will have closing parentheses for all the item counters.&lt;br /&gt;
\item You can use `(a)&#039; for alphabetical counter and &#039;(i)&#039; for  roman counter.&lt;br /&gt;
 \begin{enumerate}[a)]&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Another level of list with alphabetical counter.&lt;br /&gt;
  \item One more item before we start another.&lt;br /&gt;
  \begin{enumerate}[(i)]&lt;br /&gt;
   \item This item has roman numeral counter.&lt;br /&gt;
   \item Another one before we close the third level.&lt;br /&gt;
  \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
  \item Third item in second level.&lt;br /&gt;
 \end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
\item All list items conclude with this step.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Furthermore, the enhanced list environment allows one to prefix a string-like `step&#039; to all the item numbers. Take a look at the example below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;syntaxhighlight lang=&amp;quot;latex&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
\begin{enumerate}[Step 1.]&lt;br /&gt;
 \item This is the first step of the example list.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item Obviously this is the second step.&lt;br /&gt;
 \item The final step to wind up this example.&lt;br /&gt;
\end{enumerate}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/syntaxhighlight&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The typeset copy of the above source code is given below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cross-references==&lt;br /&gt;
In electronic publications, articles may be internally hyperlinked. Hyperlinks are generated from proper cross-references in the article. For example, the words&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will never be more than a simple text, whereas the proper cross-reference &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\ref{tiger}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; may be turned into a hyperlink to the figure itself: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Fig. 1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In the same way, the words &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Ref. [1]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; will fail to turn into a hyperlink; the proper cross-reference is &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{Knuth96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Cross-referencing is possible in LaTeX for sections, subsections, formulae, figures, tables, and literature references.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Mathematical symbols and formulae==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;  or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box for &amp;lt;math&amp;gt;\Box&amp;lt;/math&amp;gt;, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Many physical/mathematical science authors require more mathematical symbols than the few that are provided in standard LaTeX. A useful package for &lt;br /&gt;
additional symbols is the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;amssymb&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, developed by the American Mathematical Society. This package includes such oft-used symbols as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\lesssim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\gtrsim&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\hbar&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Note that your TeX system should have the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msam&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;msbm&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; fonts installed. If you need only a few symbols, such as \Box, you might try the package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;latexsym&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:symbol.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another point which would require the authors&#039; attention is the breaking up of long equations. When you use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for formatting your submissions in the preprint mode, the document is formatted in single column style with a text width of 384pt or 5.3in. When this document is formatted for final print and if the journal happens to be a double column journal, the text width will be reduced to 224pt for 3+ double column and 5+ journals respectively. All the nifty fine-tuning in equation breaking done by the author goes to waste in such cases. Therefore, authors are requested to check this problem by typesetting their submissions in the final format as well just to see if their equations are broken at the appropriate places, by changing appropriate options in the document class loading command, which is explained in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. This allows authors to fix any equation breaking problem before submission for publication. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; supports formatting the author submission in different types of final format. This is further discussed in&lt;br /&gt;
the section [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Final_print Final print].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bibliography==&lt;br /&gt;
Three bibliographic style files (*.bst) are provided &amp;amp;mdash; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-num-names.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle-harv.bst&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &amp;amp;mdash; the first one for the numbered scheme, the second for the numbered with new options of natbib.sty and the last one for the author&amp;amp;ndash;year scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the LaTeX literature, references are listed in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;thebibliography&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; environment. Each reference is a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and each &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is identified by a label, by which it can be cited in the text: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem[Elson et al.(1996)]{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is cited as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. In connection with cross-referencing and possible future hyperlinking it is not a good idea to collect more than one literature item in one &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\bibitem&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The so-called Harvard or author&amp;amp;ndash;year style of referencing is enabled by the LaTeX package &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. With this package the literature can be cited as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
* Parenthetical: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep{WB96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (Wettig &amp;amp; Brown, 1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* Textual: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet{ESG96}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces Elson et al. (1996).&lt;br /&gt;
* An affix and part of a reference: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep[e.g.][Ch. 2]{Gea97}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; produces (e.g. Governato et al., 1997, Ch. 2).&lt;br /&gt;
In the numbered scheme of citation, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\cite{&amp;lt;label&amp;gt;}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is used, since &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citep&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\citet&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; has no relevance in the numbered scheme. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package is loaded by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle.cls&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; with numbers as default options. You can change this to the author&amp;amp;ndash;year or harvard scheme by adding option &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;authoryear&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; in the class loading command. If you want to use more options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, you can do so with the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;\biboptions&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which is described in the section  [http://support.river-valley.com/wiki/index.php?title=Elsarticle.cls#Usage Usage]. For details of various options of the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;natbib&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; package, please take a look at the natbib documentation, which is part of any standard LaTeX installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Final print==&lt;br /&gt;
The authors can format their submission to the page size and margins of their preferred journal. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; provides four class options for the same.&lt;br /&gt;
But it &#039;&#039;&#039;does not mean&#039;&#039;&#039; that using these options you can emulate the exact page layout of the final print copy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 1+ journals with a text area of 384pt × 562pt or 13.5cm × 19.75cm or 5.3in × 7.78in, single column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 3+ journals with a text area of 468pt × 622pt or 16.45cm × 21.9cm or 6.5in × 8.6in, single column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;twocolumn&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: should be used along with &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;3p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; option if the journal is 3+ with the same text area as above, but double column style.&lt;br /&gt;
;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;5p&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;: 5+ with a text area of 522pt × 682pt or 18.35cm × 24cm or 7.22in × 9.45in, double column style only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical single column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Model 1+ and 3+ will have the same look and feel in the typeset copy when presented in this document. This is also the case with the double column 3+ and 5+ journal article pages. The only difference will be the wider text width of higher models. Therefore we will look at the different portions of a typical single column journal page and that of a double column article in the final format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following is the first page of a typical double column article.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Screenshots temporarily unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displayed equations and double column journals==&lt;br /&gt;
Many Elsevier journals print their text in two columns. Since the preprint layout uses a larger line width than such columns, the formulae are too wide for the line width in print. Here is an example of an equation (see equation 6) which is perfect in a single column preprint format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this document is typeset for publication in a model 3+ journal with double columns, the equation will overlap the second column text matter if the equation is not broken at the appropriate location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Els11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The typesetter will try to break the equation which need not necessarily be to the liking of the author or as happens, the typesetter&#039;s break point may be semantically incorrect. Therefore, authors may check their submissions for the incidence of such long equations and break the equations at the correct places so that the final typeset copy will be as they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Download the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;elsarticle&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; packages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following files are available for download:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle.cls elsarticle.cls], the class file&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num.bst elsarticle-num.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-harv.bst elsarticle-harv.bst], bibtex style file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-num-names.bst elsarticle-num-names.bst], bibtex style file for numerical references also allowing name-year citations&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-num.tex elsarticle-template-num.tex], template file for numerical references&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-template-harv.tex elsarticle-template-harv.tex], template file for name-year references&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-print.pdf elsdoc-print.pdf], the user documentation (print version)&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/doc/elsdoc-screen.pdf elsdoc-screen.pdf], the user documentation (screen version)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip elsarticle-v3.3-ELS.zip], the above files in a single zip file. Also it contains the source files for generating elsdoc-print.pdf.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip elsarticle-model-wise-bst.zip]. This archive contains model-wise bibliographic bst files and specimen templates.&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://download-new.river-valley.com/elsarticle/logos.zip logos.zip], the logos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Contact==&lt;br /&gt;
Please write to [mailto:elsarticle@stmdocs.in elsarticle@stmdocs.in] for any help, feedbacks or suggestions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els3.png&amp;diff=854</id>
		<title>File:Els3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://els-support4.river-valley.com/index.php?title=File:Els3.png&amp;diff=854"/>
		<updated>2021-07-22T09:43:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rishi: Rishi uploaded a new version of File:Els3.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rishi</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>